2010 Chrysler PT Cruiser Owner's Manual Owners OM 3rd

User Manual: 2010 Chrysler PT Cruiser Owners Manual Troubleshoot 2010 Chrysler PT Cruiser |

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 368 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

PT Cruiser
OWNER’S MANUAL
2010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 79
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................137
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................189
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 259
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................275
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................319
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 339
10
INDEX
...................................................................349
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵Introduction ........................... 4
䡵How To Use This Manual .................. 4
䡵Warnings And Cautions ................... 6
䡵Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6
䡵Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ............ 7
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publica-
tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-
mendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
driver’s front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
vehicle registration or title.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫Ignition Key Removal .................. 12
▫Locking Doors With a Key ............... 14
▫Key-In-Ignition Reminder ............... 14
䡵Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped ......... 14
▫To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel ...... 14
▫To Release The Steering Wheel Lock ........ 14
▫Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock
System — If Equipped .................. 15
䡵Sentry Key威— If Equipped ............... 15
▫Replacement Keys ..................... 16
▫Sentry Key威Programming ............... 17
▫General Information ................... 18
䡵Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 18
▫To Set The Alarm ..................... 18
▫To Disarm The Alarm .................. 19
▫Security System Manual Override ......... 19
2
䡵Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .............. 20
▫To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ......... 20
▫To Lock The Doors And Liftgate .......... 21
▫To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” ....... 22
▫Panic Alarm ......................... 22
▫To Program Additional Transmitters ........ 23
▫General Information ................... 25
▫Transmitter Battery Replacement .......... 25
䡵Door Locks ........................... 26
▫Manual Door Locks ................... 26
▫Power Door Locks .................... 28
▫Child Protection Door Lock System — If
Equipped ........................... 30
䡵Power Windows ....................... 31
▫Auto-Down Feature ................... 32
▫Rear Window Switches ................. 32
▫Wind Buffeting ....................... 33
䡵Liftgate ............................. 33
䡵Occupant Restraints ..................... 34
▫Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 36
▫Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt Untwisting
Procedure ........................... 42
▫Adjustable Upper Shoulder Seat Belt
Anchorage .......................... 43
▫Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode
— If Equipped ....................... 43
▫Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped ...... 44
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 44
▫Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 45
▫Seat Belt Extender ..................... 46
▫Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Airbag ............................. 46
▫Advanced Front Airbag Features .......... 48
▫Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 52
▫Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 62
▫Child Restraints ...................... 64
▫Transporting Pets ..................... 72
䡵Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 72
䡵Safety Tips ........................... 73
▫Transporting Passengers ................ 73
▫Exhaust Gas ......................... 74
▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 75
▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 77
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place.
Ignition Key Removal
Place the shift lever in PARK and make sure that the shift
lever knob pushbutton has returned to the outward
position. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position,
push the key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the
LOCK position, and remove the key.
Three Button Vehicle Key
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tem-
porarily in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the
key to the right slightly, then remove the key as de-
scribed. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK 3 — ON
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 4 — START
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors with a Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward. To unlock the door, turn the
key forward. For door lock lubrication, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: With the driver’s door open, and the key in the
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) will not function.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with-
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved
approximately a half turn in either direction and the key
is not in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
To Release the Steering Wheel Lock
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System —
If Equipped
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob pushbutton
is out. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the
key is in the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
SENTRY KEY姞— IF EQUIPPED
The Sentry Key威Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after two seconds of
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This
system utilizes ignition keys, which have an electronic
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle.
The Sentry Key威Immobilizer System does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless if the vehicle is locked or unlocked. During
normal operation, the Vehicle Security Light will come on
for three seconds immediately after the ignition switch is
turned on for a bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb
remains on, this indicates a problem with the electronics.
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds of running.
Keep in mind that an unprogrammed key is also consid-
ered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock
cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light comes on during normal
vehicle operation (when the vehicle has been running for
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in the
electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The Sentry Key威Immobilizer System is not
compatible with remote starting systems. Use of these
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss
of security protection.
All of the keys provided with a new vehicle have been
programmed to that vehicle’s electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key威has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove Sentry Keys威from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
This PIN is required for replacement of keys by an
authorized dealer. Duplication of keys must be per-
formed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A
blank key is one which has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
authorized dealer.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sentry Key姞Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
new Sentry Keys威to the system by performing the
following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the indicator
light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn
off.
The new Sentry Key威has been programmed. The Re-
mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be
programmed during this procedure. Repeat this proce-
dure to program up to a total of eight keys. If you do not
have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your autho-
rized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the autho-
rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,
and ignition switch for unauthorized operation. The
Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible
signals when activated.
If something triggers the Vehicle Security Alarm, it signal
for about 18 minutes. For the first three minutes the horn
will sound and the headlights, park lights, tail lights and
the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash. Then
the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
If the disturbance that triggered the alarm is no longer
present (doors, liftgate, ignition switch), the alarm will
continue to sound until three minutes of alarm time is
reached.
To Set the Alarm
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch,
or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, and close
all doors.
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a
door is opened, the ignition switch is turned ON, or the
power door locks are unlocked by either the power door
lock switch or the RKE transmitter, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will automatically disarm. After 16 seconds, the
Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly. This shows that
the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed.
To Disarm the Alarm
Unlock a front door using the RKE transmitter.
Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry Key威will disarm
the Vehicle Security Alarm. A valid key is one that is
programmed to that particular vehicle. A valid key will
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. An invalid key will
trigger the alarm.
Tamper Alert
If the horn sounds three times when you unlock a front
door using the RKE transmitter, the alarm has been
activated. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
Door Lock Plunger
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances ap-
proximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held RKE trans-
mitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice
to unlock all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK
button is pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate and
the parking lights will flash on twice. The time for this
feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. For
Three Button Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
EVIC-equipped vehicles refer to “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information. For non-EVIC-
equipped vehicles, perform the following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least four
seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to
indicate that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the RKE trans-
mitter.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-
LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To Lock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
If desired, the “Sound Horn on Lock” feature can be
turned on or off. For EVIC-equipped vehicles, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. For non-EVIC-equipped vehicles,
perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after four seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
The “Sound Horn on Lock” feature can be reactivated by
repeating this procedure.
To Turn Off “Flash Lights with Lock”
NOTE: The “Flash Lights with Lock” feature can be
turned on or off. For EVIC-equipped vehicles refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. For non-EVIC-equipped vehicles,
perform the following steps:
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after four
seconds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
3. Test the “Flash Lights with Lock” feature while out-
side of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the
RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position,
and the key removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
The “Flash Lights on Lock” features can be reactivated by
repeating this procedure.
Panic Alarm
The Panic Alarm mode flashes the park lights, and
sounds the horn for about three minutes or until the
alarm is turned off.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF)
noises of the system.
To Program Additional Transmitters
Each vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant with two
RKE transmitters programmed only for that vehicle. A
total of eight RKE transmitters can be programmed to
your vehicle through the use of a currently-programmed
RKE transmitter.
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional EVIC in
the instrument cluster, the RKE transmitters may also be
programmed through the EVIC display.
Use the following procedure to program additional RKE
transmitters if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry
Key威:
NOTE: When entering program mode using currently-
programmed RKE transmitter, all other programmed
transmitters will be erased and you will have to repro-
gram them for your vehicle.
1. Gather every transmitter that is to be used with the
vehicle, including any transmitters that are currently
programmed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
3. Fasten your seatbelt. (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
any chimes that may confuse you during this program-
ming procedure.)
4. Place the key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
6. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter.
7. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the PANIC button within six seconds.
8. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons.
The chime is an indication that you have successfully
entered program mode. All RKE transmitters that are to
be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of
when the chime was heard.
9. Using the RKE transmitter to be programmed, press
and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons,
simultaneously.
10. A single chime will be heard.
11. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
12. A single chime will be heard.
13. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six
additional RKE transmitters.
14. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
15. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to
60 seconds from when the original chime was heard.
After 60 seconds, all programmed RKE transmitters
function normally.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed RKE trans-
mitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
elastomer seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key
is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors while you drive,
when you park, and when leaving the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-
sonal injuries and death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Door Lock Plunger
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is on each front door panel. Press
either switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Auto Lock — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
5. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
The Auto Lock feature can be enabled or disabled. refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Power Door Lock Switch
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Auto Lock
can be enabled or disabled by performing the following
procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON, and
back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
Auto Unlock — If Equipped
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
2. The shift lever was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Auto
Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON, and
back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK
position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
3. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the
doors.
4. Verify reprogramming by driving the vehicle.
NOTE: Use the Auto Lock and Auto Unlock features in
accordance with local laws.
Child Protection Door Lock System — If
Equipped
To provide a safer environment for children riding in a
rear seat, the rear doors have the Child Protection Door
Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door and move the
control up to engage. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child Door Protection
Lock is engaged.
Child Lock Control
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (UNLOCKED position), roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
POWER WINDOWS
The power window switches are located on the instru-
ment panel above the radio. The top left switch controls
the left front window and the top right switch controls
the right front window.
The lower left switch controls the left rear window and
the lower right switch controls the right rear window.
The window lock switch is located between the window
switches, that allows you to disable the rear window
switches that are located at the back of the center floor
console.
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s and passenger’s front window switches
have an Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch
past the detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically. Press the switch a second time in either
direction to stop the window.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
Rear Window Switches
There are also rear passenger window switches located at
the rear of the center console.
Power Rear Window Switches
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked by pressing twice on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter button or by
activating the power door lock switches located on the
front doors.
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release
touch pad located on the backside of the liftgate handle,
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Liftgate Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at HIGH
speed. DO NOT use the RECIRCULATION mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB) — if
equipped
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat — if equipped
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
collision.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can best take the forces of a collision.
(Continued)
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING!
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt can’t do its job properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout
This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
the rear seatback is not fully latched. This prevents
someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt
when the rear seatback is not fully latched.
NOTE:
•
If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be pulled
out, check that the rear seatback is fully latched.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
•
If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear
center lap/shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out, the
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be
activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the
belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be
able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing
has been returned back into the retractor.
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lockout feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in
the fully upright and locked position when occupied.
If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked
and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled
out of the retractor, the vehicle should immediately
be taken to your authorized dealer for service. Failure
to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal
injury.
Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Seat Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push up or down on the anchorage button to
release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the
position that fits you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
ers are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a
deployed airbag, must be replaced immediately.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with belt
alert) seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of
starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert威) will alert the driver or front passenger to
buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the
warning is triggered, BeltAlert威will continue to chime
and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or
until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is buckled.
BeltAlert威will be reactivated if the driver’s or passen-
ger’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
For front passenger seats equipped with BeltAlert, your
vehicle is equipped to detect when it is occupied. The
BeltAlert威warning system is not activated when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. The BeltAlert威warn-
ing system may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is
folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly
stowed.
NOTE:
•
BeltAlert威can be enabled or disabled by your autho-
rized dealer.
•
Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivat-
ing BeltAlert威.
If BeltAlert威is deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat belt
remains unfastened.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbag
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air-
bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Airbags.
NOTE:
•
Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
•
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Front Airbag Components
1 — Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
2 — Knee Bolster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Airbag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag
system components:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Driver Advanced Front Airbag
•
Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
•
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
•
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
•
Weight Sensors
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the airbag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags provide en-
hanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air-
bag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the out-
board side of the front seats.
Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each airbag
deploys independently, that is a left side impact may
deploy the left airbag only and a right-side impact may
deploy only the right airbag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu-
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Airbags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints”) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Airbags room to inflate.
Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags
will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance⬙for further information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air-
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Airbags — if equipped, and front seat
belt pretensioners — if equipped, as required, depending
on the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex-
pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of collision.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating airbag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position,
in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbag
system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light and PAD indicator light in the instru-
ment panel for six to eight seconds for a
self-check when the ignition is first turned on.
After the self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn
off. The PAD indicator light will function normally. (Refer
to ⬙Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light⬙.) If
the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system,
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics
also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away by an authorized dealer.
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags, it signals
the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Differ-
ent airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to
their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the
airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
The (PAD) Indicator Light (an amber light located in the
center of the instrument panel) tells the driver and front
passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off.
The PAD Indicator light illuminates the words ⬙PASS AIR
BAG OFF⬙to show that the front passenger airbag will
not inflate during a collision requiring airbag deploy-
ment. When the right front passenger seat is empty or
when very light objects are placed on the seat, the
passenger airbag will not inflate even though the PAD
indicator light is not illuminated.
The PAD indicator light should not be illumi-
nated when an adult passenger is properly
seated in the front passenger seat. In this case,
the airbag is ready to be inflated if a collision
requiring an airbag occurs.
For all other occupants, the PAD indicator light will be
illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag is
turned off and will not inflate.
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system, children 12 years and
younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in
an appropriate child restraint (refer to “Child Re-
straints”).
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
airbag. A deploying passenger airbag can cause death
or serious injury to a child in a rear-facing infant seat.
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Indicator
Light
Airbag
Status
Adult OFF ON
Child ON OFF
Grocery Bags, Heavy
Briefcases and Other
Relatively Light Objects
ON OFF
Empty or Very Light
Objects OFF* OFF
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light ON.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improp-
erly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seatback
does not touch anything placed on the second row of
seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If there is a fault present in the Airbag system, the Airbag
Warning Light (a red light located in the center of the
instrument cluster directly in front of the driver) will be
turned on. This indicates that you should have an autho-
rized dealer service the system immediately. The Airbag
Warning Light is turned on whenever there is a fault that
can affect the operation of the airbag system. If there is a
fault present in the PAD Indicator Light, the Airbag
Warning Light remains illuminated to show that the
passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared. If
an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with
operation of the weight sensors, a fault will occur which
turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag
Warning Light. Once the lodged object is removed, the
fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of
time.
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
The (OCM) is located beneath the front passenger seat.
The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on
the measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the ORC. The ORC uses the
occupant category to determine whether the front pas-
senger airbag should be turned off. It also determines the
rate of airbag inflation during a collision.
Weight Sensors
Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are de-
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of
collision.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON positions. These include all of the items
previously mentioned.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side
airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The side
airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side
airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
Front and Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the
level of airbag deployment and provide verification.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
If a Deployment Occurs
The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modi-
fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
vice. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-
ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for
approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
•
The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the ap-
proximate six to eight-second interval.
•
The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of a collision, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-
speed deceleration data or change in velocity during
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be re-
quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com-
pany or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
Group LLC product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that are recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Vehicle speed
•
Engine RPM
•
Brake switch status
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
•
Pedal position
•
And other parameters depending on vehicle
configuration
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants and Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats. Both types of child
restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder
belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system.
•
This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the
installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn
babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car
bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car
bed must be installed in the second seating row only.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
less than one year old.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
•
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be
switched to an Automatic Locking Mode, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the
belt tight; however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary.
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, please refer to
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR).
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt from the
retractor until there is enough to pass it through the child
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then
pull on the belt until it is fully extended from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor,
pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion
around the child restraint. Follow the instructions of the
child restraint manufacture.
NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
have lower and tether anchorages that are capable of
accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having
flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child
seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific
type of lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-
compatible child seats such that two seats share a com-
mon lower anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating
positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehi-
cle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must use
the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If your child
restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only in-
stall the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Please refer to “Installing the Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage, have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
LATCH Anchors
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger-carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages. The
tether strap should be routed under the center of the head
restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of
the seatback. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-
compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat
belts.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Children too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
•
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵Mirrors .............................. 82
▫Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 82
▫Outside Mirror — Driver Side ............ 82
▫Outside Mirror — Passenger Side .......... 83
▫Power Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 83
▫Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 84
▫Sun Visor Sliding Feature ............... 84
䡵Seats ............................... 85
▫Front Seat Adjustment — If Equipped ....... 85
▫Six-Way Power Seat With Manual Recliner —
If Equipped ......................... 86
▫Manual Lumbar — If Equipped ........... 88
▫Folding Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped . . 88
▫Adjustable Head Restraints .............. 89
▫Heated Seats — If Equipped ............. 90
▫Folding Rear Seat ..................... 91
▫Tumbling Rear Seat .................... 93
▫Rear Seat Removal .................... 96
䡵Emergency Seatback Release ............... 98
3
䡵To Open And Close The Hood ............. 99
䡵Lights ............................. 101
▫Multifunction Lever .................. 101
▫Headlights And Parking Lights .......... 101
▫Lights-On Reminder .................. 102
▫Instrument Panel Dimmer .............. 102
▫High/Low Beam Switch ............... 103
▫Flash-To-Pass ....................... 103
▫Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......... 103
▫Turn Signals ........................ 104
▫Lane Change Assist ................... 104
▫Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 104
▫Map/Reading Lights .................. 105
䡵Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 106
▫Windshield Wiper Operation ............ 106
▫Intermittent Wiper System .............. 108
▫Windshield Washers .................. 109
▫Mist Feature ........................ 110
▫Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 110
䡵Tilt Steering Column ................... 110
䡵Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 112
▫To Activate ......................... 112
▫To Set a Desired Speed ................ 113
▫To Deactivate ....................... 113
▫To Resume Speed .................... 113
▫To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 113
▫To Accelerate For Passing .............. 114
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills .... 114
䡵Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 115
▫Programming HomeLink威.............. 116
▫Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 119
▫Security ........................... 120
▫Troubleshooting Tips .................. 120
▫General Information .................. 120
䡵Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 121
▫Express-Open Feature ................. 122
▫Wind Buffeting ...................... 123
▫Sunroof Maintenance ................. 123
䡵Electrical Power Outlets ................. 123
䡵Storage ............................. 126
▫Center Console/Armrest Storage Bin ...... 126
▫Storage Pockets ..................... 128
䡵Console Features ...................... 128
䡵Rear Shelf Panel — If Equipped ........... 129
▫Position 1 (Top) ..................... 130
▫Position 2 (Middle) ................... 130
▫Position 3 (Floor) .................... 131
▫Position 4 (Vertical) ................... 132
▫Position 5 (Table) .................... 132
䡵Rear Window Features .................. 134
▫Rear Window Wiper/Washer ............ 134
▫Rear Window Defroster ................ 135
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Outside Mirror — Driver Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirror — Passenger Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located to the left of the
steering column on the instrument panel. To adjust the
view in the outside mirrors, turn the rotary knob to the L
(Left), O (Center) or R (Right) position. After selecting the
mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want the
mirror to move. Use the O (Center) position to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position.
Power Mirror Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an illuminated
vanity mirror located on the sun visor. To use the mirror,
rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover
upward. The lights turn on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover turns off the lights.
NOTE:
•
The driver vanity mirror will become inoperable when
the vehicle alarm is enabled.
•
The passenger vanity mirror will become inoperable if
left on for more than 10 minutes.
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors are designed to slide outward along the
support shaft to provide extended coverage of the wind-
shield and door glass.
1. Rotate the sun visor downward.
2. Pull the visor forward to remove if from the swivel
clip.
3. Slide the visor outwards along the shaft to the desired
position.
To store the sun visor to its original position, reverse the
above process.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Front Seat Adjustment — If Equipped
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat to the
desired position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Adjusting Bar
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Six-Way Power Seat With Manual Recliner — If
Equipped
The seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near
the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up or down,
forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat.
This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to
the rear of the power seat switch. To recline, lean forward
slightly before lifting the lever, then lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and
lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position.
Power Seat Switch
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the re-
cliner only when the vehicle is parked.
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Recliner Control Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Manual Lumbar — If Equipped
The lumbar adjustment is located on the inboard side of
the driver’s seatback. To increase support, rotate the
handle down.
Folding Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
The passenger front seat may be folded fully forward to
provide additional cargo space.
Lumbar Adjust Handle
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To fold the seat forward, pull up on the recliner lever
located on the outboard side of the seat.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a rear impact. Adjust the height of a head restraint to
a position that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear. To raise a head restraint, pull
up on the head restraint. To lower a head restraint, push
in the button that is part of the head restraint rod guide,
and push down on the head restraint.
Folding Seat Control Lever
Head Restraint Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion
and seatback. The driver and front passenger seats are
heated. The controls for each heater are located near the
bottom center of the instrument panel.
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
Off.
Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
ing. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut Off the heating elements.
If High-level heating is selected, the system automatically
switches to Low-level heating and turns one indicator
light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation. It will
turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after
an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation. If
Low-level heating is selected, the system automatically
turns the heater and the indicator light off after 30 min-
utes of continuous operation.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. To fold down either seatback, push
the button that is located on the top of the seatback near
the outboard side, and push or pull the seatback forward.
When returning the seatback to its upright position,
make sure that the seatback latch is engaged. You should
not be able to fold the seatback forward unless the release
button is pressed or the emergency release handle is
pulled. Do not allow passengers to ride in a rear seat if
the seatback latch is not engaged.
Folding Rear Seat Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
WARNING!
•
Do not ride in any of the rear seating positions
when one or more of the seat latches is not
engaged. Riding with the seat latches disengaged
could result in serious or fatal injury.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
NOTE:
•
If the rear center lap/shoulder belt appears to be
locked into place, check to verify that the seatback is
fully latched.
•
If the seatback is properly latched and the rear center
lap/shoulder belt still does not operate properly, check
and see if the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
system is activated. Refer to “Occupant Restraints/
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)” in “Things to
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lockout feature to ensure that the seatback is in the
fully upright and locked position when occupied. If
the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and
the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled out of
the retractor, the vehicle should immediately be
taken to an authorized dealer for service. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious or fatal
injury.
Tumbling Rear Seat
To provide additional storage in the cargo area, each rear
seat can be tumbled forward.
CAUTION!
It is important that the front seats be pulled forward
to the midpoint of the seat track to avoid contact
between the rear seat and the front seatback. If the
front seat is not pulled forward the two seats will
make contact during the tumbling motion and cause
damage to the rear seat material. After the rear seat is
tumbled forward and secured the front seat can then
be repositioned to the preferred position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
1. Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold
down the rear seatback.
2. Pull the release handle located on the outboard side of
the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.
Folding Rear Seat Button Tumbling Seat Release Strap
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the tether, located at the base of the seat
cushion, onto the hook bar on the center trim panel to
hold the seat in place.
To return the rear seat to its upright latched position,
rotate the seat cushion rearward to latch the seat. Then
lift the seatback to its upright latched position.
When returning the seatback to its upright position,
make sure that the seat latches are engaged. You should
not be able to fold the seatback forward and/or tumble
the seat unless the release button is pressed, the emer-
gency release handle is pulled and/or the tumbling seat
release strap is pulled. Do not allow passengers to ride in
a rear seat if one or more of the seat latches is not
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not ride in any of the rear seating positions when
one or more of the seat latches is not engaged. Riding
with the seat latches disengaged could result in
serious or fatal injury.
NOTE: The tumbling seat tether should be clipped onto
the elastic strap provided on the base of the seat cushion
before returning the seat to its normal position.
Tumbling Seat Tether
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Rear Seat Removal
The rear seats can be removed to provide more cargo
space.
1. Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold
down the rear seatback.
2. Pull the release lever located on the outboard side of
the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.
Folding Rear Seat Button
Tumbling Seat Release Strap
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Lift up the release levers to disengage the seat from the
floor attachments.
4. Using the handle on the seat, the seat assembly can
now be lifted and removed from the vehicle.
NOTE: Small rollers on the bottom of the folded seat
and a handle at the top allow the seat to be easily moved
when removed from the vehicle.
To reinstall the rear seat, insert the seat into the floor
attachments. Lower the release levers of the seat to latch
the front floor attachments and rotate the seat rearward
to latch the seat. Lift the seatback to its upright latched
position.
WARNING!
In an accident, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Release Lever Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
EMERGENCY SEATBACK RELEASE
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the liftgate
area with the rear shelf panel in position 1 (Top) or
position 2 (Middle), either by climbing into the
liftgate from outside, or through the inside of the
vehicle. Always close the liftgate when your vehicle
is unattended. Once in the liftgate area, young chil-
dren may not be able to escape, even if they entered
through the rear seat. If trapped in the liftgate,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
As a security measure, a Seatback Emergency Release
lever is built into the left side rear seatback latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked
inside the liftgate area with the rear shelf panel in
position 1 (Top) or position 2 (Middle), the left side rear
seatback can be unlatched by pulling down on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the left rear seatback
latching mechanism. Refer to “Cargo Area Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Once unlatched the seatback can be pushed forward to
gain access into the interior of the vehicle.
Emergency Seatback Release
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Make sure that the elastic loop is around the
emergency release handle at all times. If the handle is
pulled downward, entirely through the elastic loop, the
handle will not return to its original position and the
seatback may not operate properly.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
2.
Move the safety latch, located under the front edge of
the hood, slightly to the right of center and raise the hood.
Use the hood prop rod clipped to the driver’s side of the
engine compartment to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the hood prop at the location stamped into
the inner hood surface.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 8 in (20 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Latch
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming
and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Headlights and Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel lights. Turn to
the second detent for headlight operation.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or
down.
NOTE: If the driver’s door is left open, and the head-
lights or parking lights are left on, a chime will sound.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the driver’s door
is opened.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Dimmer Control
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beams. Pull the lever toward you
to switch the headlights back to low beams.
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will turn on the high beam headlights
until the lever is released.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is in the multifunction
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking or low beam headlights and pull out the
end of the lever.
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the parking
lights or the headlights on low beam. Selecting high
beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Fog Light Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
•
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
•
A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for
more than 1 mile (2 km).
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime
Running Lights (DRL) and operate at lower intensity
whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is running, the
headlight switch is off, the parking brake is released and
the shift lever is in any position except PARK.
Turn Signal Operation
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will turn off
automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn
on again when the turn signal is not operating.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rearview mirror. Each light is turned on by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
light off. The lights also come on when a door is opened
or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. These lights will automati-
cally shut off 10 minutes after the ignition is OFF. Further
use of the lights, without starting the vehicle, will pro-
vide 90 seconds of activity prior to automatic shut off.
Map Reading Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the
lever. For information on using the rear window wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Under-
standing the Features of Your Vehicle”.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for
low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for
high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever Front Wiper Control
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
“park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON
position.
CAUTION!
•
Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than OFF.
•
In cold weather, always turn OFF the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning OFF the engine. If the wiper switch
is left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield,
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the
vehicle is restarted.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
park position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the
park position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the wind-
shield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval.
There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of two cycles every
second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds
between cycles at vehicles speeds below 10 mph
(16 km/h), or from a minimum of one cycle every second
Front Wiper Control
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between
cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph (16 km/h).
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two or three
wipe cycles and then turn OFF.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Mist Feature
Push downward on the windshield wiper/washer con-
trol lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the
windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle.
The wipers will continue to operate until you release the
lever.
Headlights With Wipers (Available with Automatic
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned OFF
if they were turned ON by this feature.
The “Headlights with Wipers” feature can be turned on
or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.
Mist Control
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.
With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the
steering column up or down, as desired. Pull up on the
lever to lock the column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
Tilt Steering Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at approximately either 30 mph
(40 km/h ) or 35 mph (56 km/h) depending on the model
or engine size. The Electronic Speed Control lever is
located on the right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con-
trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The CRUISE
indicator will turn off. The system should be turned off
when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set a Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, pull
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
While in the AutoStick威mode, Electronic Speed Control
will only operate in 3rd and 4th gear.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever toward CANCEL, or normal brake
or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deacti-
vate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set
speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning
off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, pull the RESUME
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is ON, speed can be
increased by pulling up and holding RESUME ACCEL.
Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and
the new speed will be set.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result ina2mph
(3 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is ON,
pull down and hold SET DECEL. Release the lever when
the desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be
set.
Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result ina1mph
(2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed decreases.
To Accelerate for Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
Vehicles equipped with four-speed automatic transaxles
may experience a downshift to 3rd gear while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This downshift to 3rd
gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
NOTE: HomeLink威is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink威Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
Begin Programming
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威button you wish to program.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away
from the HomeLink威button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威button and the handheld transmitter button
until the HomeLink威indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and handheld transmitter buttons.
Watch for the HomeLink威indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
NOTE:
•
Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
•
After training a HomeLink威channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威and the ga-
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, proceed to Step 5 “Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code System.”
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door.
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using HomeLink威
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink威Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink威Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3, with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威has
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indica-
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading lamp.
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position, press
and hold the switch rearward to fully open the sunroof.
The sunroof can be stopped at any position between
closed and full open. Momentarily pressing the switch
rearward will activate the Express-Open feature, causing
the sunroof to open automatically.
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Press and hold the button in the center of the sunroof
switch to open the vent. The sunroof can be stopped at
any position between closed and full vent. To close the
sunroof from the vent position, press and hold the switch
forward. Releasing the switch will stop the movement of
the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial
vent position until the switch is pushed forward again.
Express-Open Feature
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open feature.
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward
position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed forward again.
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
(Continued)
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
A standard 12 volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located in
the front of the center floor console.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
This outlet will accept a cigar lighter unit, which is part of
the optional Smokers Package. To preserve the heating
element of the cigar lighter unit, do not hold the lighter in
the heating position. As a child safety precaution, this
power outlet is powered by the ignition switch, only
when the switch is in the ON or ACC position.
NOTE:
•
To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威knob and
element must be used.
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
There is one optional power outlet located in the right
rear cargo area.
NOTE: The rear power outlet will not accept a cigar
lighter unit as it is intended only for accessory items.
Both the front and rear power outlets include tethered
caps that are labeled with a key symbol or battery
symbol, indicating the power source.
Rear Power Outlet
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high-power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
STORAGE
Center Console/Armrest Storage Bin
The center console provides a sliding armrest with two
storage compartments under the lid.
Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise
the upper cover.
Sliding Armrest
Upper Storage Button
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Inside is an area to store a cellular phone and other
miscellaneous items.
Push the lower button on the front of the armrest, and
raise the armrest for access to the lower storage bin.
Upper Storage Bin Lower Storage Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
The lower storage area can be used for storing up to six
compact discs (CDs) and other miscellaneous items.
Storage Pockets
There are storage pockets located on each door trim
panel.
CONSOLE FEATURES
The console has two front cupholders, a removable coin
holder, 12 Volt power outlet and a front storage tray.
There are three additional cupholders; one is molded in
the center of the console to hold large cups, and the
others are in the rear of the console to serve passengers in
the rear seat. The floor console power outlet will also
operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped
with an optional Smoker’s Package).
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
(Continued)
Lower Storage Bin
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high-power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
REAR SHELF PANEL — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Shelf Panel attaches to guides in the rear cargo
area. The rear shelf panel may be installed in one of five
different positions.
NOTE: The liftgate may be opened or closed with the
rear cargo shelf panel in position 1, position 2, position 3
or position 4.
WARNING!
•
To avoid tipping, lock the shelf securely in all
positions.
•
Do not drive this vehicle with the liftgate open, or
use the shelf as a seat.
•
Failure to follow these warnings could result in
serious or fatal injury.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Position 1 (Top)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the top guides and slide forward. Press down on the back
of the shelf panel to lock it into place.
WARNING!
Do not load objects on the shelf in position 1 (top). In
an accident, objects could strike occupants causing
serious or fatal injury.
Position 2 (Middle)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the middle guides and slide forward. Press down on the
back of the shelf panel to lock it into place.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 1
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 2
(middle). Failure to follow this warning could cause
the shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.
Position 3 (Floor)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the bottom guides and slide forward.
NOTE: To carry items that may soil the carpeting, the
rear shelf panel may be inverted in position 2 or position
3.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Position 4 (Vertical)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the vertical guides behind the rear seatbacks near the
floor and slide downward. Push the shelf panel forward
to lock it by aligning the vertical guide with the rubber
stop of the shelf panel.
WARNING!
When in the vertical position, the rear shelf panel
should not be used as a barrier for large objects in the
cargo area with the seatbacks folded down. In an
accident objects could strike the seatbacks or occu-
pants causing serious or fatal injury.
Position 5 (Table)
With the liftgate open the rear shelf panel can be moved
rearward to act as a serving counter.
1. Align the front corners of the shelf panels with the lock
position on the backside of the top rear guides. Press
down on the shelf panel to lock it into place.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 4
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Twist the knob on the underside of the panel and
lower the shelf leg.
3. Install the shelf leg into the liftgate latch area as
labeled on the rear scuff plate.
WARNING!
Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 5
(table). Failure to follow this warning could cause the
shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.
Rear Shelf Leg Release Knob
Rear Shelf Panel Position 5
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window wiper/washer control is located on the
right side of the steering column.
Rotate the switch upward to the “on” position will
activate the rear wiper.
Rotate the switch upward to the “washer” position
will activate that rear washer. The washer pump
will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring
is engaged. Upon release, the wipers will cycle three
times before returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return
to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer Control
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an
automatic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may
result if the rear wiper switch is left in the on
position.
•
In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper
switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If the
rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper
freezes to the window, damage to the rear wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
•
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the rear wiper blade from returning to the park
position. If the rear wiper control is turned off and
the blade cannot return to the park position, dam-
age to the rear wiper motor may occur.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵Instrument Panel Features ............... 140
䡵Instrument Cluster — Base ............... 141
䡵Instrument Cluster — Premium ........... 142
䡵Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 143
䡵Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) — If
Equipped ............................ 155
▫Compass Mini-Trip Computer Reset Button . . 155
▫Compass/Temperature Display .......... 156
▫Odometer Display .................... 158
▫Trip Odometer (ODO) ................. 158
䡵Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) –
If Equipped .......................... 159
▫EVIC Functions ..................... 160
▫To Reset The Display ................. 161
▫Compass/Temperature/Audio ........... 161
▫Average Fuel Economy ................ 161
▫Distance To Empty (DTE) .............. 162
▫Elapsed Time ....................... 162
4
▫Compass Variance .................... 162
▫Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) ............ 163
▫Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) .......................... 164
▫Automatic Compass Calibration .......... 166
▫Manual Compass Calibration ............ 167
䡵Setting The Analog Clock ................ 168
䡵Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single-Disc)
Radio With Optional Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) And Uconnect™ Phone
Capability ........................... 168
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 169
▫Operating Instructions — CD Mode ....... 172
▫Operating Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . 174
▫Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone
— If Equipped ...................... 175
▫Operating Instructions — Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . 175
䡵Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped ............................ 176
▫System Activation .................... 176
▫Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 176
▫Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)
Mode In REF, And RAQ, Radios .......... 177
▫Selecting a Channel ................... 177
▫Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels ..... 178
▫Using The PTY (Program Type) Button (If
Equipped) ......................... 178
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙.................... 178
▫PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙.................... 178
▫Satellite Antenna ..................... 178
▫Reception Quality .................... 179
䡵CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 179
䡵Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ....... 180
䡵Climate Controls ...................... 180
▫Climate Control Operation .............. 180
▫Operating Tips ...................... 185
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Vent 5 — Glove Compartment 9 — Storage Cubby
2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Power Windows 10 — Lower Switch Bank
3 — Analog Clock 7 — Radio 11 — Side Mirror Control *
4 — Assist Handle 8 — Climate Controls * If Equipped
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on
the front passenger’s (right) side of the vehicle.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call an authorized deal-
ership for service.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Main-
taining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4. Speedometer
The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).
5. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
6. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
7. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
8. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip
mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer button” for additional
information.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans-
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the odometer:
door .............................Door Ajar
gATE ...........................Liftgate Ajar
LoW TirE .................... LowTirePressure
gASCAP .......................Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus-
ter, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) for further information.
LoW TirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three
cycles.
gASCAP Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
words “gASCAP” will display in the odometer display
area. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and
press the odometer reset button to turn off the message.
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
9. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed
Control system is ON.
NOTE: The word “SET” will not illuminate when the
Electronic Speed Control System is on.
10. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON position, before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
11. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip
mode to reset.
12. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
13. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
14. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).
15. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
17. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
18. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
19. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds while the Vehicle Security
Alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
20. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
21. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
22. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
23. Airbag Warning Light
This light turns on and remains on for seven
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
24. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
25. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Button—If Equipped
Pushing this button will switch between the different
EVIC functions.
Press the CMTC reset button to scroll through sub-menus
(i.e., Trip Functions: AVG Fuel Economy, DTE Elapsed
Time, and Units).
26. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display — If
Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC), when the appropriate conditions
exist, this display shows the EVIC messages. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center”.
On vehicles equipped with Compass Mini-Trip Com-
puter (CMTC) the display provides the outside tempera-
ture, one of eight compass headings to indicate the
direction the vehicle is facing and the current radio
station. Refer to “Compass Mini-Trip Computer”.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER (CMTC) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
The Compass Mini-Trip Computer features a driver-
interactive display (displays information on outside tem-
perature, compass direction, and trip information). The
display is located on the lower left part of the cluster
below the fuel and engine temperature gauge.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Compass Mini-Trip Computer Reset Button
CMTC Reset Button — Secondary Reset Button
Press the left Compass/Temperature RESET button to
scroll through sub-menus (i.e., Trip Functions: AVG Fuel
Economy, DTE Elapsed Time, and Units (US or Metric).
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the window below the fuel and
engine temperature gauge:
E........Eight-point compass headings are displayed
(N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
14°F............ Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius)
AV G ..........AverageFuel Economy (US or Metric)
DTE .......................Distance to Empty
ET ............................Elapsed Time
NOTE: Temperature and Average Fuel Economy can be
changed from U.S. or Metric. by pressing and holding the
(left) secondary pushbutton.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
Compass/Temperature Display
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accu-
racy, the compass variance should be properly set accord-
ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle
will be driven. When properly set, the compass will
automatically account for this difference.
NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as
cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
panel. This is where the compass module is located and
such devices may interfere and cause false compass
readings.
To Set the Variance
Start the engine, and leave the transmission shift lever in
the PARK position. Press and hold (approximately ten
seconds) the compass/temperature RESET button until
the current variance zone number is displayed. To change
Compass Variance Map
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the zone, press and release the RESET button to incre-
ment the variance one step. Repeat as necessary, until the
desired variance is achieved.
NOTE: Zone 8 is the factory default. During program-
ming, the Zone Number will wrap around from Zone 15
to 1. Please refer to the Compass Variance Zone Map in
the following section: “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)”
Automatic Compass Calibration
The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, eliminat-
ing the need to manually calibrate the compass. When
the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and
the CAL indicator message will flash in the CMTC until
the calibration is complete.
A good calibration requires a level surface and an envi-
ronment free from large metallic objects such as build-
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
Calibrate the compass by driving slowly, under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in one or more complete circles in a area free
from large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator in the
CMTC turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manu-
ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
compass:
1. Start the engine, and leave the transmission shift lever
in the PARK position.
2. Press and hold (approximately 10 seconds) the
Compass/Temperature RESET button until the current
variance zone number is displayed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
3. Release the RESET button, then press and hold again
(approximately 10 seconds), until the direction is dis-
played with the CAL indicator on continuously in the
display.
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
in one or more complete 360 degree circles, under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large
metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
Odometer Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
CRUISE ......................Cruise Activated
gASCAP .......................Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
These messages can be manually turned off by pressing
the right reset button (on the instrument cluster).
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the right button (on the instru-
ment cluster) to switch from odometer, to trip A or trip B.
Press and hold the right button while the odometer/trip
odometer is displayed, to reset.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
reset.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. The EVIC consists of the following:
•
System Status
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
•
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
•
Compass heading
•
Outside temperature display
•
Trip computer functions
•
Uconnect™ hands-free communication system dis-
plays — if equipped
•
Audio mode display
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
•
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
•
RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not In
(automatic transmission) or Vehicle Is In Motion
(manual transmission).
•
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime, if speed is above 1 mph)
•
Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime, if speed is above 1 mph)
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
•
Headlights On
•
Key In Ignition
EVIC Functions
Press the EVIC button until one of the following func-
tions are displayed on the EVIC:
•
Compass/Temperature/Audio
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
•
Elapsed Time
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
•
Personal Settings
To Reset the Display
Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the
resettable function currently being displayed. Reset will
only occur if a resettable function is currently being
displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and
release the EVIC button a second time within three
seconds of resetting the currently-displayed function
(Reset ALL will be displayed during this three-second
window).
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing, the outside temperature, and the current radio
station.
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
to “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)”.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
RESET, or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
EVIC Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from where it was before the reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of LOW FUEL. This display will con-
tinue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a signifi-
cant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW
FUEL text and a new DTE value will be displayed, based
on the current values in the DTE calculation and the
current fuel tank level.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass head-
ing.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Set the Variance
Follow this procedure to set the Variance:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the
shift lever in PARK.
2. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
you have displayed the Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features) menu.
3. Press and release the EVIC button until “Compass
Variance” and the current variance zone number displays
in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the EVIC button to increment the
variance zone by one, (one button press per update), until
the proper variance zone number is selected according to
the map.
NOTE: Zone 8 is the factory default. During program-
ming, the Zone Number will wrap around from Zone 15
to 1.
5. Press and release the EVIC button to exit.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Refer to “Starting And Operating” “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS),” for system operation.
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
shift lever is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmission).
Press and release the EVIC button until “Personal Set-
tings” is displayed in the EVIC.
Use the EVIC button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais depend-
ing on availability. As you continue, the displayed infor-
mation will be shown in the selected language.
NOTE: Uconnect™ language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in
“Uconnect™ — If Equipped” for details.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH (24 km/h)
When ON is selected, all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON
or OFF appears, to make your selection.
Auto Unlock On Exit
When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
(manual transmission) or the vehicle is stopped and the
shift lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL position (automatic
transmission). Press and hold the EVIC button when in
this display until ON or OFF appears to make your
selection.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
When Driver’s Door 1st is selected, only the driver’s door
will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. A second press is
required to unlock the remaining locked doors. When
Remote Unlock All Doors is selected, all doors will
unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK
button. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this
display until Driver’s Door 1st or All Doors appears, to
make your selection.
Sound Horn On Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights On
Lock/Unlock feature. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until ON or OFF appears, to make
your selection.
Flash Lights On Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn On Lock feature activated. Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON
or OFF appears, to make your selection.
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make
your selection.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system, DVD video system,
power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for
up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
OFF. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
OFF, 45 sec, 5 min, or 10 min appears, to make your
selection.
Turn Headlights on with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the RKE transmitter. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until OFF, 30 sec,
60 sec, or 90 sec appears, to make your selection.
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
U-Connect威system are confirmed. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF
appears, to make your selection.
Display English or Metric
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system units can be
changed between English and METRIC.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
US or METRIC appears, to make your selection.
Automatic Compass Calibration
The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, eliminat-
ing the need to manually calibrate the compass. When
the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and
the CAL indicator message will flash in the EVIC until
the calibration is complete.
A good calibration requires a level surface and an envi-
ronment free from large metallic objects such as build-
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
Calibrate the compass by driving slowly, under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in one or more complete circles in an area free
from large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
•
A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
tracks, etc.
•
Keep all magnetic objects, such as laptop computers,
iPod’s, cell phones and PDA’s (anything with a bat-
tery) away from the compass sensor which is located
in the top of the instrument panel. These devices can
interfere with compass accuracy and performance.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears to be inaccurate, you may wish to
manually calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the
compass, make sure the proper Compass Variance Value
is selected. (Refer to “Compass Variance” for additional
information). Then, continue to calibrate the compass as
follows:
1. Start the engine and leave the shift lever in the PARK
position.
2. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
the EVIC displays the Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features) menu.
3. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
“Calibrate Compass (Yes)” is displayed. A EVIC button
press (longer than two seconds) will place the compass in
calibration mode.
4. The CAL indicator will come on continuously in the
EVIC display, to indicate that the compass is now in the
calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven
to calibrate. Press the EVIC button from the ⬙Calibrate
Compass (Yes)⬙screen to exit the EVIC Customer-
Programmable features, and return it to its normal oper-
ating mode.)
5. Drive the vehicle slowly, under 5 mph (8 km/h),
completing one or more circles (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns
off. The compass will now function normally.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first, and then
more quickly the longer the button is held.
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE-DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL Uconnect™ Multimedia
(SATELLITE RADIO) AND Uconnect™ Phone
CAPABILITY
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Setting The Analog Clock
REF Radio
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Push the
ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360–
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is OFF and the
ignition is ON.
MODE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. “MUTE” will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
or turning the ignition ON/OFF, will cancel the MUTE
feature.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
NOTE: In Hands-Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at
each listenable station before continuing to the next. To
stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations in either AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display
for five seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/AUDIO con-
trol.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the TUNE/AUDIO
control to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to
blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the TUNE/AUDIO control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the Rewind/Fast Forward button causes the
tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of
the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or
Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the rotary TUNE control clockwise to increase or
counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control, and “BASS” will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and “MID”
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid-Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and “TREB”
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and “BAL”
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and “FADE”
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the TUNE control again or wait five seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To Set The
Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and “SET 2” will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,
12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored
into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Preset Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory, 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations.
Operating Instructions — CD Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
•
On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
player.
•
This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first
10 seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning the ignition
OFF/ON will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for five seconds.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Rewind) button works in a similar manner.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
play.
Operating Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard
3.5 mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and
releases the MODE button until “AUX” appears on the
display.
NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK posi-
tion to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙will display. Press the MUTE button a
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning the ignition
OFF/ON will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
MODE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to the “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)”
for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-
dian residents. Please have the following information
available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD EJECT and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press
the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.
Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve
ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN
will page down until the first four digits are displayed.
The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other
button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes
has passed since any button was pushed.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ESN/SID Access With RAQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
in REF, and RAQ, Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information such as song
title and artist, press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and hold SEEK to bypass stations or use the TUNE
knob to search for the next channel. Press the top of the
button to search up and the bottom of the button to
search down. Holding the TUNE button causes the radio
to bypass channels until the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock-
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙button within five seconds. The radio will play
7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the
next channel of the selected program type. Press the
⬙SCAN⬙button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙or ⬙SCAN⬙button while
performing a music-type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music-type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna. The luggage rack (if
equipped), should also not be positioned directly above
the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Climate Control Operation
The Climate Control system allows you to balance the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located in the
center instrument panel, below the radio.
Climate Controls
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The air conditioning system of your vehicle
contains R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the
ozone layer in the upper atmosphere.
The controls are as follows:
Fan Control
Use the Fan control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the sys-
tem in any mode you select. The fan
speed increases as you move the con-
trol to the right from the off position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the fan control is left in the “O” (off) position.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
The Mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution. You can select either a
primary mode, as identified by the
symbols, or a blend of two of these
modes. The closer the control is to a
particular mode, the more air distribu-
tion you receive from that mode
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
window demist outlets with a small amount
through the defrost outlet.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if
the A/C button has not been pressed and the indicator
lamp is off. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
only when necessary.
CAUTION!
If the Defroster is not working the windshield and
windows may become fogged, and your visibility
will be greatly diminished. See your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control
airflow.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen-
gers, the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so
that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear
passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward
the left rear passenger.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler temperatures
while the red area indicates warmer
temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Air Conditioning (A/C) — If Equipped
Press the A/C button to engage the air
conditioning. A lamp will illuminate
when the air conditioning system is
engaged
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
MAX A/C
To quickly cool the vehicle interior
follow the steps listed below:
1. Set the Temperature Control to Max Cool.
2. Set the Mode Control to Panel or Bi-Level.
3. Press the Recirculation button and the A/C button.
4. Adjust the Fan Control to desired airflow setting.
NOTE:
•
Recirculation Mode will not operate in Floor, Mix or
Defrost modes.
•
See “Circulation Control” in this section, for proper or
extended use of this position.
Circulation Control
Rotate this control to choose between
outside air intake or recirculation of
the air inside the vehicle. A lamp will
illuminate when you are in Recircula-
tion mode. Only use the Recirculation
mode to temporarily block out any
outside odors, smoke, or dust and to
cool the interior rapidly upon initial startup in very hot
or humid weather.
NOTE: Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of
moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For defogging, select
the Outside Air position.
NOTE: Recirculation mode will not operate in Floor,
Mix or Defrost modes.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
Operating Tips
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Window Fogging
Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, use the
A/C, Panel and Blower controls. Direct the panel outlets
toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate without
A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by using the defrost position.
If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window
surfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect-
ing on the inside surface of the glass.
NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recirculate
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, use the Outside Air position.
Summer Operation
Vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze
coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to
raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection
against overheating. A 50% concentration is
recommended.
Outside Air Intake
When operating the system, make sure the air intake,
directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush,
snow or other obstructions such as leaves. Leaves col-
lected in the air-intake plenum may reduce airflow and
plug the plenum water drains.
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of
vehicle operation.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air
toward the side windows when the system is in either the
Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area
of the windows through which you view the outside
mirrors.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵Starting Procedures .................... 192
▫Automatic Transmission ............... 192
▫Normal Starting ..................... 192
▫Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or
⫺29°C) ............................ 193
▫If The Engine Fails To Start ............. 193
▫After Starting ....................... 194
䡵Automatic Transmission ................. 194
▫Key Ignition Park Interlock ............. 195
▫Brake/Transmission Interlock System ...... 195
▫Four-Speed Automatic Transmission ....... 196
▫Gear Ranges ........................ 197
䡵AutoStick威— If Equipped ............... 200
▫Operation ......................... 200
▫General Information .................. 201
䡵Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 202
▫Acceleration ........................ 202
▫Traction ........................... 202
5
䡵Driving Through Water ................. 203
▫Flowing/Rising Water ................. 203
▫Shallow Standing Water ............... 203
䡵Power Steering ....................... 205
▫Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 206
䡵Parking Brake ........................ 207
䡵Brake System ........................ 209
▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If
Equipped .......................... 210
䡵Traction Control System — If Equipped ...... 212
䡵Tire Safety Information ................. 214
▫Tire Markings ....................... 214
▫Tire Identification Number (TIN) ......... 217
▫Tire Terminology And Definitions ......... 218
▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 219
䡵Tires — General Information ............. 223
▫Tire Pressure ....................... 223
䡵Tire Chains .......................... 231
䡵Snow Tires .......................... 231
䡵Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 231
䡵Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..... 232
▫Base System ........................ 235
䡵Fuel Requirements ..................... 237
▫2.4L Engine ........................ 237
䡵Adding Fuel ......................... 241
▫Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............. 242
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 243
䡵Vehicle Loading ...................... 244
▫Vehicle Certification Label .............. 244
䡵Trailer Towing ........................ 246
▫Common Towing Definitions ............ 246
▫Towing Tips ........................ 257
䡵Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 258
▫Automatic Transmission ............... 258
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
and press the shift lever knob button before shifting to
any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine has not
started within three seconds, slightly press the accelera-
tor pedal while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to
start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure above.
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from
another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if
done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully.
Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What to Do In Emer-
gencies” for further information.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If The Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This
should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition key in the ON position, release the
accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting” pro-
cedure.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only move the shift lever
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
You must step on the brake pedal and press the shift lever
knob button before you will be able to shift out of PARK.
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must step on the brake pedal and press the
shift lever knob button before you will be able to move
the shift lever out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key
can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition
is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever
is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position. Always step on the
brake pedal and press the shift lever knob button
before shifting out of PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will function
normally, except you may be able to shift the vehicle from
PARK, without pressing the brake pedal. If this occurs
obtain service from an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift lever knob
pushbutton is out. It also prevents moving the shift lever
out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON position,
and the brake pedal is pressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Four-Speed Automatic Transmission
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-6°F (-21°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
shift cycles.
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
RESET Mode
The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor-
mal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transmission shifts automatically into sec-
ond gear. The transmission remains in second gear
despite the forward gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and
NEUTRAL will continue to operate. This second gear
limp-in feature allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears:
1. Stop the vehicle and move the shift lever into PARK.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF then restart the engine.
3. Move the shift lever into DRIVE and resume driving.
4. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, and then move the
shift lever into the PARK position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the key from the
ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key
is removed from the ignition, the shift lever is locked
in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never
leave unattended children inside a vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
•
When moving the shift lever into PARK, press the
button on the shift lever knob and firmly move the
lever all the way forward until it stops.
•
Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
ensure it is in the PARK position.
•
When engaged in PARK, you will not be able to move
the shift lever rearward without pressing the lever
knob button.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
turn the ignition from LOCK to ON, so the steering
wheel and shift lever are released. Otherwise, dam-
age to the steering column or shift lever could result.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
DRIVE/OVERDRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and best fuel economy.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using
the DRIVE/OVERDRIVE range, such as when operating
the vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly
terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
trailers), use third gear.
DRIVE — 3rd
This range eliminates shifts into OVERDRIVE. The trans-
mission will operate normally in first and second gear
while in this range.
NOTE: Using third gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance, fuel economy, and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
Use third gear when descending steep grades to prevent
brake system distress.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
LOW — 1st
This range should be used for maximum engine braking
when descending steep grades. In this range, up shifts
will occur only to prevent engine over speed while down
shifts from second to first gear will occur as early as
possible.
AUTOSTICK姞— IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick威is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear-shifting capability to provide you with more
control. AutoStick威allows you to maximize engine brak-
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
The AutoStick威position is just below the OVERDRIVE
position and is identified by the word “AutoStick”. When
you move the shift lever into the AutoStick威position, it
can be moved from side to side. Moving the lever to the
left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift.
The gear position will be shown in the gear display,
located in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
•
In AutoStick威mode, the transmission will only shift
up and down when the driver manually moves the
shift lever right (D+) or left (D-).
•
An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) portion of the in-
strument cluster. This message appears in order to
alert the driver to upshift to the next gear. The
UPSHIFT message will display while operating the
vehicle at higher engine revolutions per minute
(RPM).
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
You can move the shift lever in or out of the AutoStick威
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal. If you choose the OVERDRIVE mode,
the transmission will operate automatically; shifting be-
tween the four available gears. When you wish to engage
AutoStick威, simply move the shift lever to the AutoStick威
position. The transmission will remain in the current gear
until an upshift or downshift is chosen.
Move the shift lever back to the OVERDRIVE position to
shift out of the AutoStick威mode.
General Information
•
You can start out in first, second, or third gear. Shifting
into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). The system will ignore
attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
•
The transmission will automatically downshift to 1st
gear when coming to a stop.
•
The transmission will automatically upshift from first
to second gear and from second to third gear when
engine speed reaches about 6,300 RPM.
•
Downshifts from third to second gear above 74 mph
(119 km/h) and from second to first gear above
41 mph (66 km/h) will be ignored.
•
Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
•
While in the AutoStick威mode, the Electronic Speed
Control will only function in third or fourth gear.
Downshifting out of third gear will turn off the speed
control.
•
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick威is engaged.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
•
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
•
If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick威mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
•
Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
(Continued)
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power-assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power-assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How-
ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system oper-
ating.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the “Brake Warning
Light” will illuminate.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. A significant decrease in braking performance or
vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
vehicle harder to control. You could have an accident.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
•
Pumping of the ABS will diminish their effective-
ness and may lead to an accident. Pumping makes
the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on
your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
(Continued)
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
The ABS Telltale Light monitors the Anti-Lock
Brake System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is
not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the “Brake Warning Light” is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Light”
remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Systems are not function-
ing properly. Immediate repair to the ABS system at an
authorized dealer is required.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self-check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
A clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
Brake pedal pulsations,
•
A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly-installed or high-output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
dealership professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Traction Control System (TCS) will improve accel-
eration and steering on slippery surfaces by reducing tire
spin. The system reduces wheel slip and maintains
traction at the driving (front) wheels by engaging the
brake on the wheel that is losing traction. When this
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
occurs the “TCS Indicator Light” located above the
instrument cluster odometer will flash. The system oper-
ates at speeds below 35 mph (56 km/h).
A pushbutton at the center of the instrument panel,
below the radio, turns the Traction Control System ON or
OFF.
The system is always in the “ON” mode unless:
•
The TCS OFF switch has been used to turn the system
off;
•
There is a Anti-Lock Brake System malfunction;
•
There is a Traction Control System malfunction;
•
The system has been automatically deactivated to
prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated
brake temperatures.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the “TCS
Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster.
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is
a normal condition. The system will remain disabled for
about four minutes until the brakes have cooled. The
system will automatically reactivate and turn off the
“TCS Indicator Light.”
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow, turn
the Traction Control System off before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle free.
TCS OFF Switch 5
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN) 4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R= Construction code
—⬙R⬙means radial construction
—⬙D⬙means diagonal or bias construction
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
EXAMPLE:
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H= Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C,D,E= Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: Safety,
Economy, and Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability.
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Tire Pressures for High-Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High-speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Temporary-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary-use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings that apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is shown in the following
diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn you of a low tire pressure based on
the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
Tire Rotation
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
TPMS will warn you of a low tire pressure if the tire
pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natu-
ral pressure loss through the tire.
TPMS will continue to warn you of low tire pressure as
long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the
tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold
placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
been illuminated, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The
system will automatically update and the TPMS Telltale
Light will turn off once the system receives the updated
tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPMS
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
TPMS Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPMS Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
•
TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
•
TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Telltale Light.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim-
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to perform a
monthly tire pressure check on, and to maintain the
proper pressure of all the tires on your vehicle.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the TPMS Telltale Light
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
The TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 sec-
onds and then remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the
ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provid-
ing the system fault still exists. The TPMS Telltale Light
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies (RF)
as the TPMS sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Excessive accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS Sensors.
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS Sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn ON due to
the low tire.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS
Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the
following licenses:
United States ..................... KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L Engine
2.4L engines are designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high quality unleaded “regular” gasolines
having an octane rating of 87. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended.
Under normal conditions, the use of premium gasoline
will not provide a benefit over high quality unleaded
“regular” gasolines, and in some circumstances may
result in poorer performance.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85
Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol,
it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer if that gasoline
contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
Fuel System Cautions
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s per-
formance:
CAUTION!
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance, damage the emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your dealer for service assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2 in
(50 mm) inside the opening. If using a portable container,
it should have a flexible nozzle long enough to force open
the restricting door.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the passen-
ger’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
NOTE:
•
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in
the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door reinforce-
ment.
•
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replace-
ment cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
(Continued)
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and doing so will cause the malfunction
indicator light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) in the
instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tight-
ened each time the vehicle is refueled.
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the Odometer/
Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Description” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and press the odometer/trip odometer
reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
continues, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for
all loading conditions.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension compo-
nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all
loose items securely before driving. Improper weight
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your
vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes
operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes an 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The trailer tongue weight is the downward force exerted
on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not
be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You
must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s direc-
tions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing
towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and cross-
winds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight-
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for
heavier tongue weights (TW) and may be required de-
pending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration/loading to
comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR require-
ments.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in an accident.
Weight-Distributing Systems may not be compatible with
surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer
manufacturer or a reputable recreational vehicle dealer
for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer
service center for package content.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS
Class Max.
GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Towing Weights
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.4L/Automatic 20 sq ft (1.9 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 110 lbs (50 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to
“Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side,
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Load-
ing Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR, or GCWR ratings. Refer to “Maintenance Sched-
ule” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
PARK. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. TW (Trailer Tongue Weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized. This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of trailer tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements – Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires-General Information” in “Starting and Operat-
ing” for proper tire inflation procedures.
•
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires-General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper
inspection procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
•
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires-General Informa-
tion” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-
ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four–or seven-pin
connector wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following four-pin connector and seven-pin
connector illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The OVERDRIVE/DRIVE gear range can be selected
when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while
in this range, third gear should be selected.
NOTE: Using the third gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Mainte-
nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
•
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
•
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle
speed.
•
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
•
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION!
Recreational towing on vehicle’s equipped with a
automatic transmission is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵Hazard Warning Flashers ................ 260
䡵If Your Engine Overheats ................ 260
䡵Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 262
▫Jack Location ....................... 262
▫Spare Tire Stowage ................... 263
▫Spare Tire Removal ................... 263
▫Preparations For Jacking ............... 264
▫Jacking Instructions ................... 265
䡵Jump-Starting ........................ 268
▫Preparations For Jump-Start ............. 269
▫Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 270
䡵Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 272
䡵Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 273
▫Towing With The Key-In-Ignition ......... 273
▫Towing Without The Key-In-Ignition ....... 274
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — Slow down.
•
In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
260 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer of the Coolant Tempera-
ture Gage rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and
stop the vehicle. Turn off the air conditioning and
wait until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for
more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Cooling System Pressure
Cap” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” and follow the
warnings under the paragraph.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 261
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed behind the right rear
side trim panel in the cargo area.
Do not attempt to raise this vehicle using a bumper jack.
Jack Storage
262 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear of the
vehicle by means of a hook/basket mechanism. To re-
move or stow the compact spare, use the jack handle to
rotate the “spare tire drive” nut. The nut is located under
the rear scuff plate at the right rear of the cargo area, just
inside the liftgate opening.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the cover and fit the jack-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the left until you can remove the
swivel hook from the stowage basket. Swing the basket
down to remove the compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
The hook is designed for use with the jack handle
only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch.
Spare Tire Storage
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 263
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transaxle) or
REVERSE (manual transaxle).
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
264 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly, and shift a automatic
transmission into PARK; a manual transmission
into REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 265
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
stowage bag.
NOTE: If equipped with a center cap that covers the
wheel nuts, pry off the cap using the small end of the lug
wrench. To reinstall the cap, make sure it is properly
lined up before pushing it onto the wheel.
Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on the
cross-member below the radiator, on the front sus-
pension cross-member, or on the rear axle assembly.
2. There are two jacking locations on each side of the
body, one at the front of the vehicle and one in the rear on
the trailing arm bracket under the triangular cut out
symbol. Turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed.
Front Jacking Location
266 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
3. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
4. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers where applicable off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone-shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten
the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 267
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling original wheel, properly
align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel
cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
6. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut
torque is 100 ft lbs (135 N m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a qualified
service station.
7. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Stow the lug wrench, and jack in their designated
location. Secure all parts using the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
8. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
9. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. The correct
pressure as required.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
268 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the engine
compartment just behind the left front headlight assem-
bly.
Battery Connections
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Ground Location (Stud on Hood Safety Latch)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 269
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
270 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the stud on the hood latch assembly (-) of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the stud
on the hood latch assembly (-) of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 271
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-
trol, turn the system OFF before attempting to “rock” the
vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back-and-forth between RE-
VERSE and DRIVE (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE
and 1st gear (manual transaxle). Using, the least accel-
erator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels is most effective.
272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck. And do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing With The Key-In-Ignition
Four-Speed Automatic Transaxle
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions: The steering column must be unlocked and the
shift lever must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be
towed must not exceed 100 miles (160 km), and the
towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/h). If the
transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed
more than 100 miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed
with the front wheels off the ground to avoid damage to
the transaxle.
Manual Transaxle
Your vehicle may be towed in a forward direction, with
all four wheels on the ground, and the shift lever in the
NEUTRAL position. If the transaxle is not operative, the
vehicle must be towed with the front wheels off the
ground.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 273
All Transaxles
CAUTION!
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC position, not in
the LOCK position.
Do not attempt to use sling-type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach it to front or rear suspension compo-
nents. Damage to your vehicle may result from
improper towing.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans-
axle remains in NEUTRAL.
Towing Without The Key-In-Ignition
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle.
Towing Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing with
all four wheels on the ground)
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle, it
may be towed in a forward direction, at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the transaxle is in
NEUTRAL.
If the ignition key is not available, vehicles with auto-
matic transaxles can not be flat towed at any time.
274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵Engine Compartment — 2.4L ............ 277
䡵Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ..... 278
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .......... 278
䡵Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 278
䡵Replacement Parts .................... 280
䡵Dealer Service ....................... 280
䡵Maintenance Procedures ................ 281
▫Engine Oil ........................ 281
▫Engine Oil Filter .................... 284
▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............. 285
▫Maintenance-Free Battery ............. 286
▫Air Conditioner Maintenance ........... 287
▫Body Lubrication ................... 288
▫Windshield Wiper Blades ............. 289
▫Adding Washer Fluid ................ 289
▫Exhaust System .................... 290
▫Cooling System .................... 292
7
▫Brake System ...................... 298
▫Automatic Transmission .............. 299
▫Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 302
䡵Fuses ............................. 308
▫Integrated Power Module (IPM) ......... 308
䡵Vehicle Storage ...................... 311
䡵Replacement Bulbs ................... 311
䡵Bulb Replacement .................... 312
▫Headlamps ....................... 312
▫Front Parking, Turn Signal, And Side Marker
Lamps ............................ 313
▫Front Fog Lamps – If Equipped ......... 314
▫Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps . . . 314
▫Backup Lamps ..................... 315
▫Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) .......................... 315
䡵Fluid Capacities ..................... 316
䡵Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...... 317
▫Engine ........................... 317
▫Chassis .......................... 318
276 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 — Battery
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick
3 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Engine Oil Fill
5 — Power Distribution Center 11 — Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 277
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). OBD
II will also store diagnostic codes and other information
to assist an authorized service technician in making
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap
until a ⬙clicking⬙sound is heard. This is an indication that
the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer
reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
278 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 279
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
280 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 281
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling the crankcase as indicated by an oil level
above the “MAX” mark on the engine oil dipstick
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to decide if any apply to you.
•
Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
•
Trailer towing.
•
Taxi, Police, or delivery service (commercial service).
•
Off-road or desert operation.
282 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months,
whichever comes first, and follow “Maintenance Sched-
ule B.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on “Maintenance Schedule A.”
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 283
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.4L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber, should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils, provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where they can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
284 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This engine has a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use
a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high-quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
MOPAR威engine oil filters are high-quality oil filters and
are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the filter at the
intervals shown on “Maintenance Schedule A”. If, how-
ever, you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or
severe conditions, the filter element should be inspected
periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals
shown on “Maintenance Schedule B”.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high-quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威engine air
cleaner filters are a high-quality filter and are
recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 285
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner, or use the washer solvent.
This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road
film and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. To avoid dam-
aging the blades, make sure that they are not frozen to the
glass before turning them on. Keep the blade rubber out
of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
Adding Washer Fluid
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the passenger side and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have a competent technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
change or lubrication. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emissions control device.
290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected for a prolonged period.
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush and Refill
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by hu-
mans and animals, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
CAUTION!
If ethylene glycol engine coolant (antifreeze) is in-
gested by anyone, contact a physician immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling, and warm to normal operating tempera-
ture, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is on. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the
master cylinder area before removing the cap. With disc
brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
low, check the system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi-
nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and the fluid.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299
Fluid Level Check
Use the following procedure to check the automatic
transmission fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of
60 seconds.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear posi-
tion, ending with the shift lever in PARK.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate
the possibility of dirt entering the transmission.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82° C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is
driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held
comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
temperature below 80°F (27°C).
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then,
remove dipstick and note the reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the
filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
overfill.
300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
•
Dirt and water in the transmission can cause
serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from
entering the transmission after checking or replen-
ishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
re-seated properly.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed as follows:
Maintenance Schedule A — No change necessary.
Maintenance Schedule B — Every 60,000 miles
(100 000 km) change fluid and filter under the following
conditions:
•
Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation,
•
Stone and gravel impact,
•
Insects, tree sap and tar,
•
Salt in the air near sea coast localities, and
302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威Car Wash or equiva-
lent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains,
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels be kept clear and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up-paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent, or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威or
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威Total Clean or
equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威Total Clean or equiva-
lent, then MOPAR威Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent,
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery.
Use MOPAR威Vinyl Cleaner or equivalent to clean vinyl
upholstery and trim.
Leather Seat Care and Cleaning
MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive-type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters, or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror,
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
FUSES
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses.
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
1 EMPTY
2 20 Amp Yellow AWD ECU
Feed — If
Equipped
3 10 Amp Red CHMSL Brake
Switch Feed
4 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch
Feed
5 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow
6 10 Amp Red IOD Sw/Pwr
Mir/Ocm Steer-
ing Cntrl Sdar/
Hfm
7 30 Amp Green IOD Sense1
8 30 Amp Green IOD Sense2
Integrated Power Module
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
9 40 Amp
Green
Power Seats
10 20 Amp Yellow CCN Feed,
Power Locks
11 15 Amp Lt Blue Power Outlet
12 20 Amp Yellow Ign Run/Acc
Inverter
13 20 Amp Yellow Pwr Run/Acc
Outlet RR
14 10 Amp Red IOD CCN/ In-
terior Lighting
15 50 Amp
Red
RAD Fan Relay
Battery Feed
16 15 Amp Lt.
Blue
IGN Run/Acc
Cigar Ltr/
Sunroof
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
17 10 Amp Red IOD Feed CVT
Mod/Mod_
Wcm
18 40 Amp
Green
ASD Relay
Contact Feed
19 20 Amp Yellow PWR Amp 1 &
Amp 2 Feed
20 15 Amp Lt.
Blue
IOD Feed Ra-
dio
21 10 Amp Red IOD Feed In-
trus Mod/Siren
22 10 Amp Red IGN RUN
Hvac/Compass
Sensor
23 15 Amp Lt.
Blue
ENG ASD Re-
lay Feed 3
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
24 25 Amp Natu-
ral
PWR Sunroof
Feed
25 10 Amp Red Heated Mirror
26 15 Amp Lt.
Blue
ENG ASD Re-
lay Feed 2
27 10 Amp Red IGN RUN Only
ORC Feed
28 10 Amp Red IGN RUN
ORC/OCM
Feed
29 EMPTY
30 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats
31 10 Amp Red Headlamp
Washer Relay
Control
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
32 30 Amp
Pink
ENG ASD Con-
trol Feed 1
33 10 Amp Red ABS MOD/
J1962 Conn/
PCM
34 30 Amp
Pink
ABS Valve Feed
35 40 Amp
Green
ABS Pump
Feed
36 30 Amp
Pink
Headlamp
Washer Relay
Contact Feed
37 25 Amp Natu-
ral
Spare
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
•
Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb No.
Center Console Floor Lamp .................T37
Climate Controls ......................6233137
Console Gear Selector ................... PC194
Dome Lamp (Sedan) ..................... T579
Instrument Cluster Illumination ...............74
Overhead Reading Lamp (Overhead Console). . . T1037
Overhead Reading Lamp (Rearview Mirror).....T192
Rear Cargo ............................T906
Visor Vanity .........................6501966
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
All the interior bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHTS BULBS – Exterior Bulb No.
Low Beam Headlamp ................... 9006XS
High Beam Headlamp ..................9005XS
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker
Lamp............................4157NAKX
Front Fog Lamp.........................9145
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
(Sedan) ..........................921–W16W
Rear Tail/Stop .......................... 3157
Rear Turn Signal ....................... 3757A
Backup Lamp ....................3157-P27/7W
License Lamp ........................... 168
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamps
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new headlamp bulb with your
fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life.
1. Remove the headlamp access cover splash shield,
located in the front wheel well opening.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Rotate the socket to the left one-quarter turn, and
replace the bulb.
Front Parking, Turn Signal, and Side Marker
Lamps
1. Remove the headlamp access cover splash shield,
located in the front wheel well opening.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Rotate the socket to the left one-quarter turn, and
replace the bulb.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
Front Fog Lamps – If Equipped
1. Remove the fasteners attaching the lower splash
shield to gain access to the fog lamp.
2. Twist and remove the bulb from the fog lamp housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.
Rear Tail, Stop and Turn Signal Lamps
1. Remove the screw attaching the tail lamp housing and
remove the housing from the vehicle.
2. Twist the bulb socket one–quarter turn to remove it
from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Backup Lamps
1. To remove the backup lamp, you must take a fiber
stick and slide it along the inboard side of the lamp and
compress a spring clip to allow it to partially ⬙pop⬙out to
the secondary catch.
2. Fully compress the clip to get the lamp to come out
completely.
3. Remove the socket from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
1. Open the liftgate and remove the liftgate CHMSL
cover.
2. Remove CHMSL lens from the housing by unlatching
the two side latches.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 15 Gallons 56.7 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
Cooling System *
2.4L Engine (MOPAR威Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
6.5 Quarts 6.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine Champion威RE16MC (Gap 0.040 in [1.02 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威ATF+4威Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威product.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威ATF+4威Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威product.
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵Emissions Control System Maintenance ...... 320
䡵Maintenance Schedules ................. 320
▫At Each Stop For Fuel ................. 321
▫Once a Month ...................... 322
▫At Each Oil Change .................. 322
▫Maintenance Schedule B ............... 322
▫Maintenance Schedule A ............... 333
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services in-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are three maintenance schedules that show re-
quired service for your vehicle.
First is “Maintenance Schedule B.” It is for vehicles that
are operated under the conditions that are listed below
and at the beginning of the schedule.
•
Day and night temperatures are below 32°F(0°C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50 percent of your driving is at sustained
high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F(32°C).
•
Trailer towing.†〫
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
320 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser-
vice).†〫
•
Off-road or desert operation.
•
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel.
NOTE:
•
If ANY of these apply to you, then change your engine
oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months,
whichever comes first, and follow “Maintenance
Schedule B” in this section.
•
If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and replace
the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or
60 months, whichever comes first, and follow “Main-
tenance Schedule B” in this section.
•
Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed
for “Maintenance Schedule B.”
Second is “Maintenance Schedule A.” It is for vehicles
that are not operated under any of the conditions listed
under “Maintenance Schedule B.”
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 321
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and transmission, and add as needed.
•
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
•
Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for
proper fit.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the exhaust system.
•
Inspect the brake hoses.
•
Inspect the CV joints and front suspension compo-
nents.
•
Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
•
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
Maintenance Schedule B
Follow “Maintenance Schedule B” if you usually operate
your vehicle under one or more of the following condi-
tions.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
322 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually
operated under one or more of the conditions marked
with an 〫.
•
Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
•
Trailer towing.†〫
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser-
vice).†〫
•
Off-road or desert operation.
•
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel.
NOTE:
•
If ANY of these apply to you, then change your engine
oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months,
whichever comes first, and follow ’Maintenance
Schedule B” in this section.
•
If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and replace
the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or
60 months, whichever comes first, and follow “Main-
tenance Schedule B” in this section.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on “Maintenance Schedule A” in
this section.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 323
Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000 18,000
(Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (15 000) (20 000) (25 000) (30 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
XXXXX X
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as
necessary. *
X
Inspect the make-up air filter, replace as nec-
essary.* X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
324 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000
(Kilometers) (35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000) (55 000) (60 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
XXXXX X
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 325
Miles 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 54,000
(Kilometers) (65 000) (70 000) (75 000) (80 000) (85 000) (90 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
XXXXX X
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Change the brake fluid. If vehicle is used for
trailer towing.
X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as
necessary.*
X
Inspect the make-up air filter, replace as nec-
essary.*
X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
326 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 57,000 60,000 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000
(Kilometers) (95 000) (100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
XXXXX X
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seal. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
Change the automatic transmission fluid and
filter.〫
X
Flush and replace engine coolant at
60 months, if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 327
Miles 75,000 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000
(Kilometers) (125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at three months.
XXXXX X
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with
four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as nec-
essary.* X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary.* X
Inspect the make-up air filter, replace as necessary.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
328 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 102,000 105,000
(Kilometers) (155 000) (160 000) (165 000) (170 000) (175 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at three months.
XXXXX
Rotate tires. X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Change the brake fluid if your vehicle is used for
trailer towing.
X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace as
necessary.*
X
Replace the engine timing belt.* X
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not re-
placed at 60 months.
X
Inspect the make-up air filter, replace as necessary.* X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 329
Miles 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000
(Kilometers) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at three months.
XXXXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with
four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Replace the generator belt. X
Replace the power steering/air conditioning belt. X
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.〫X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
120 months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles
(200 000 km).
X
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
330 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 123,000 126,000 129,000 132,000 135,000
(Kilometers) (205 000) (210 000) (215 000) (220 000) (225 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at three months.
XXXXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace as
necessary.*
X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 331
Miles 138,000 141,000 144,000 147,000 150,000
(Kilometers) (230 000) (235 000) (240 000) (245 000) (250 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at three months. XXXXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with
four-wheel disc brakes. X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Adjust the generator belt tension. X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
† This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,
limousine-type operation, or trailer towing.
〫This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,
limousine-type operation, or trailer towing.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all
receipts.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
332 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Schedule A
Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000
(Kilometers) (10 000) (20 000) (30 000) (40 000) (50 000) (60 000)
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30] [36]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X XXXXX
Rotate tires. X XXXXX
Inspect the brake linings. X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 333
Miles 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000
(Kilometers) (70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000)
[Months] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with
four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months,
if not done at 102,000 miles (200 000 km)
X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
334 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 102,000
(Kilometers) (120 000) (130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000) (170 000)
[Months] [72] [78] [84] [90] [96] [102]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes. X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Replace the engine timing belt.* X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Inspect the PCV valve, replace if necessary.* X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not
replaced at 60 months. X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 335
Miles 108,000 114,000 120,000 126,000 132,000 138,000
(Kilometers) (180 000) (190 000) (200 000) (210 000) (220 000) (230 000)
[Months] [108] [114] [120] [126] [132] [138]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X XXXX
Rotate tires. X X XXXX
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes. X
Replace the air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the generator belt. X
Replace power steering/air conditioning belt. X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
120 months, if not done at 102,000 miles
(200 000 kg).
X
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
336 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 144,000 150,000
(Kilometers) (240 000) (250 000)
[Months] [144] [150]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X
Rotate tires. XX
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Adjust the generator belt tension. X
Replace the air cleaner filter.* X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all
receipts.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 337
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle .............................. 341
▫Prepare For The Appointment ........... 341
▫Prepare A List ...................... 341
▫Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 341
䡵If You Need Assistance ................. 341
▫Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 342
▫Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 342
▫In Mexico Contact .................... 342
▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 343
▫Service Contract ..................... 343
䡵Warranty Information .................. 344
䡵MOPAR威Parts ....................... 344
䡵Reporting Safety Defects ................ 344
▫In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 344
▫In Canada ......................... 345
9
䡵Publication Order Forms ................ 345
䡵Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades ........................ 346
▫Treadwear ......................... 347
▫Traction Grades ..................... 347
▫Temperature Grades .................. 347
340 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 341
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247–9753
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
342 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
line at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800-485-
2001).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 343
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞PARTS
MOPAR威fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
344 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 345
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
346 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 347
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
348 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) .............. 210
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 294
Adding Fuel ........................... 241
Additives, Fuel .........................239
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 285
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............287
Air Conditioning Controls .................180
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............185
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............. 287,288
Air Conditioning System ................ 180,287
Air Pressure, Tires ....................... 224
Airbag ................................46
Airbag Deployment .......................59
Airbag Light ....................... 61,75,153
Airbag Maintenance ....................... 60
Airbag, Side ........................ 49,52,57
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ............... 52
Alarm Light ...........................152
Alarm, Panic ............................ 22
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ............... 18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............. 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................178
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...........293,316,317
Capacities ...........................316
Disposal ............................296
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............. 210
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................153
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........18
Appearance Care ........................ 302
Auto Down Power Windows ................32
Automatic Door Locks ...................28,29
Automatic Transaxle ..............12,192,194,299
Adding Fluid .........................300
Filter ...............................301
Fluid and Filter Changes ................. 301
Fluid Level Check .....................300
Interlock System .....................15,196
Reset Mode ..........................197
350 INDEX
Special Additives ...................... 301
Autostick .............................200
Back-Up Lights .........................315
Battery ...............................286
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......25
Belts, Seat ..............................75
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............288
B-Pillar Location ........................ 219
Brake, Parking .......................... 207
Brake System ........................ 209,298
Anti-Lock (ABS) .......................210
Fluid Check .......................... 298
Master Cylinder ....................... 298
Parking .............................207
Warning Light ........................ 150
Brakes ...............................209
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............195
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........72
Bulb Replacement .....................311,312
Bulbs, Light ..........................77,311
Calibration, Compass ............... 157,162,167
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........ 316
Capacities, Fluid ........................316
Caps, Filler
Fuel ...............................242
Oil (Engine) ....................... 277,284
Power Steering ........................ 206
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............295
Car Washes ............................ 303
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............74,241
CD (Compact Disc) Player ................. 168
Cellular Phone ..........................180
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............ 315
Chains, Tire ............................ 231
Changing A Flat Tire ..................... 262
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 215
10
INDEX 351
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) .............148,278
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............. 73
Checks, Safety ...........................73
Child Restraint ..........................64
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ...............68
Child Restraint with Automatic Belts ........... 67
Child Safety Locks ........................30
Child Seat .............................. 70
Clean Air Gasoline .......................237
Cleaning
Wheels .............................304
Climate Control .........................180
Clock .............................168,170
Coin Holder ...........................128
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ............. 179
Compact Spare Tire ...................... 226
Compass .....................154,155,157,162
Compass Calibration ................ 157,162,167
Compass Variance .......................156
Computer, Trip/Travel ....................154
Console ..............................128
Contract, Service ........................ 343
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................316,317
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .......... 295
Cooling System ......................... 292
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............. 294
Coolant Level ......................292,296
Disposal of Used Coolant ................296
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................293
Inspection ...........................296
Points to Remember ....................297
Pressure Cap ......................... 295
Radiator Cap .........................295
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........... 293
Corrosion Protection .....................302
Cruise Light ........................... 148
Cupholders ............................128
352 INDEX
Customer Assistance ..................... 341
Daytime Running Lights ................... 104
Dealer Service ..........................280
Defroster, Rear Window ................... 135
Defroster, Windshield ................... 75,182
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ................. 108
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................278
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................103
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle ....................300
Power Steering ........................ 206
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............296
Engine Oil ........................... 284
Door Locks .............................26
Door Locks, Automatic ....................28
Door Opener, Garage .....................115
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ...................202
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................ 203
Electric Remote Mirrors .................... 83
Electrical Power Outlets ...................123
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....... 112
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) .............................154,159
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking .............................262
Jump Starting ......................... 268
Towing .............................273
Emergency Seat Back Release (Sedan) .......... 98
Emission Control System Maintenance ......278,320
Engine ...............................277
Break-In Recommendations ................ 72
Checking Oil Level ..................... 281
10
INDEX 353
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................292
Cooling .............................292
Exhaust Gas Caution .................. 74,241
Fuel Requirements ..................... 237
Jump Starting ......................... 268
Oil ...........................281,316,317
Oil Change Interval ....................282
Oil Filler Cap ...................... 277,284
Oil Filter ............................ 317
Oil Selection ..........................283
Oil Synthetic .........................284
Overheating ..........................260
Temperature Gauge ....................143
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .......... 58
Ethanol ...............................238
Exhaust Gas Caution ..............34,74,241,290
Exhaust System .......................74,290
Exterior Lights ..........................77
Filler Location Fuel .................... 143,242
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................285
Automatic Transaxle ....................301
Engine Oil ........................284,317
Flashers ..............................260
Hazard Warning .......................260
Turn Signal ........................77,149
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 193
Fluid Capacities ......................... 316
Fluid Leaks .............................77
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle ....................300
Brake ..............................298
Cooling System ....................... 292
Power Steering ........................ 206
Fluids ................................317
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 317
Fog Light Service ........................314
354 INDEX
Fog Lights ..........................103,152
Folding Front Passenger Seat ................ 88
Folding Rear Seat ........................91
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) ..................91
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................272
Fuel ..............................237,317
Adding .............................241
Additives ............................239
Capacity ............................316
Clean Air ............................ 237
Ethanol .............................238
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................143,242
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ................... 143
Gasoline ............................237
Gauge ..............................143
Light ...............................152
Materials Added ....................... 239
Methanol ............................238
Octane Rating ........................ 237
Requirements .........................237
Tank Capacity ........................ 316
Fuel System Caution .....................242
Fueling ...............................241
Fuses ................................308
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........115
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............ 242,243,278
Gasoline, Clean Air ......................237
Gasoline (Fuel) .......................237,316
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................237
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ...................143
Fuel ...............................143
Odometer ...........................146
Tachometer ..........................144
General Information .................. 18,25,237
General Maintenance ..................... 281
Glass Cleaning .......................... 306
10
INDEX 355
Gross Axle Weight Rating ..................246
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............. 244,246
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................ 203
Hazard Warning Flasher ................... 260
Head Restraints .......................... 89
Headlights
Bulb Replacement ......................312
Cleaning ............................306
Dimmer Switch ....................... 103
On With Wipers ....................... 110
Switch ..............................101
Heated Seats ............................90
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................248
HomeLink威(Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 115
Hood Release ...........................99
Ignition ...............................12
Key ................................12
Ignition Key Removal .....................12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) .................15,19
Infant Restraint .......................... 64
Information Center, Vehicle .................159
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 82
Instrument Cluster .................... 141,143
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............140
Instrument Panel Cover ................304,307
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............. 307
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............ 308
Interior Appearance Care .................. 305
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........108
Introduction .............................4
Jack Location ........................... 262
Jack Operation .......................262,265
Jacking Instructions ...................... 265
356 INDEX
Jump Starting ..........................268
Key, Programming ........................ 17
Key, Replacement ........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................15
Key-In Reminder .........................14
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) ................ 20
Keys .................................12
Lane Change Assist ......................104
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................... 36
Latches ................................77
Hood ...............................99
Lead Free Gasoline ...................... 237
Leaks, Fluid ............................ 77
Life of Tires ............................229
Liftgate (Sedan) .......................... 33
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .............134
Light Bulbs ....................... 77,311,312
Lights ..............................77,101
Airbag ..........................61,75,153
Alarm ..............................152
Anti-Lock ...........................153
Back-Up ............................315
Brake Warning ........................150
Center Mounted Stop ................... 315
Daytime Running ......................104
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............... 103
Engine Temperature Warning .............. 152
Exterior ..............................77
Fog ..........................103,152,314
Front Replacement ..................... 312
Headlight Switch ...................... 101
Headlights On With Wipers ............... 110
High Beam Indicator .................... 154
Instrument Cluster .....................101
Lights On Reminder .................... 102
Low Fuel ............................152
10
INDEX 357
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........ 148
Map Reading ......................... 105
Oil Pressure .......................... 153
Passing .............................103
Rear Servicing ........................ 314
Seat Belt Reminder ..................... 151
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............18,152
Service .............................312
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 148
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .............. 152
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........144,232
Traction Control ....................... 213
Turn Signal ...................... 77,104,313
Voltage ............................. 149
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....143
Loading Vehicle ......................244,245
Capacities ...........................245
Tires ............................... 219
Locks
Child Protection ........................ 30
Door ................................26
Power Door ........................... 28
Steering Wheel .........................14
Low Tire Pressure System ..................232
Lubrication, Body .......................288
Lumbar Support .........................88
Maintenance Free Battery .................. 286
Maintenance, General .....................281
Maintenance Procedures ...................281
Maintenance Schedule
Schedule “A”-Non Turbo ................ 333
Schedule “B” ......................... 322
Schedule “B”-All Engines ................322
Maintenance Schedules .................... 320
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 148,278
Manual, Service ......................... 345
358 INDEX
Map/Reading Lights ..................... 105
Methanol .............................238
Mini-Trip Computer ...................... 155
Mirrors ................................82
Electric Remote ........................83
Outside ..............................82
Rearview .............................82
Vanity ...............................84
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............. 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ............... 232
Mopar Parts .........................280,344
Multi-Function Control Lever ............... 101
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 72
Occupant Restraints .....................52,59
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ............. 34,49,52
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............237
Odometer .............................146
Trip .............................146,149
Oil, Engine ......................... 281,316
Capacity ............................316
Change Interval ....................... 282
Checking ............................281
Disposal ............................284
Filter ...............................284
Identification Logo ..................... 283
Materials Added to .....................284
Quality .............................283
Recommendation ...................283,316
Synthetic ............................284
Viscosity ............................ 284
Oil Filter, Selection ....................... 285
Onboard Diagnostic System ................278
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ...........115
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Outside Air Intake ....................... 186
Overdrive .............................199
10
INDEX 359
Overheating, Engine ................... 143,260
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 4,345
Paint Care ............................. 302
Panel Rear Shelf ........................129
Panic Alarm ..........................22,23
Parking Brake .......................... 207
Passing Light ...........................103
Personal Settings ........................164
Pets ..................................72
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........219
Power
Door Locks ........................... 28
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........123
Seats ................................86
Steering ..........................205,206
Sunroof .............................121
Windows ............................. 31
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............45
Preparation for Jacking ....................264
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................44
Programmable Electronic Features ............164
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 23
Radial Ply Tires ......................... 226
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......... 295
Radio Operation ......................168,180
Radio, Satellite (Uconnect威studios) ...........176
Radio (Sound Systems) .................... 168
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) ...................... 33
Rear Seat, Folding ......................91,93
Rear Seat Removal ........................ 96
Rear Shelf Panel ........................129
Rear Window ........................... 32
Rear Window Defroster ................... 135
Rear Window Features ....................134
360 INDEX
Rear Wiper/Washer ...................... 134
Recreational Towing ......................258
Reformulated Gasoline ....................237
Refrigerant ............................288
Reminder, Lights On ..................... 102
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................44
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) ...............20
Replacement Bulbs .......................311
Replacement Keys ........................ 16
Replacement Parts ....................... 280
Replacement Tires ....................... 229
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 344
Restraints, Child ....................... 64,70
Restraints, Infant .........................64
Rotation, Tires ..........................231
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ................. 75
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............77
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................344
Safety, Exhaust Gas ....................... 74
Safety Information, Tire ...................214
Safety Tips ............................. 73
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................178
Satellite Radio (Uconnect威studios) ...........176
Schedule, Maintenance .................... 320
Seat Belt Maintenance .................... 307
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 44
Seat Belts ..............................75
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .................. 43
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........43
And Pregnant Women ...................45
Child Restraint ........................ 64
Extender .............................46
Front Seat ............................ 36
Inspection ............................75
Pretensioners ..........................44
Rear Seat .............................36
Untwisting Procedure .................... 42
10
INDEX 361
Seat Belts (Sedan) ........................ 34
Seats .................................85
Emergency Seat Back Release (Sedan) ........ 98
Folding Front Passenger ..................88
Head Restraints ........................ 89
Heated ..............................90
Lumbar Support ....................... 88
Power ...............................86
Rear Folding ........................91,93
Rear Folding (Sedan) .................... 91
Removal .............................96
Tumbling Rear (Sedan) ...................93
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............293
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .................15,19
Sentry Key Programming ................... 17
Service and Maintenance .................. 320
Service Assistance .......................341
Service Contract ......................... 343
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) ....................148
Service Manuals ........................ 345
Setting the Clock ..................... 168,170
Settings, Personal ........................164
Severe Service ..........................322
Shoulder Belts ...........................36
Side Airbag ............................. 57
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) .......... 187
Signals, Turn ......................77,104,149
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ............... 202
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................231
Snow Tires ............................231
Spare Tire ..........................226,263
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...........112,148
Speedometer ...........................144
Speedometer and Odometer ................ 141
Starting ...............................192
Automatic Transmission .................192
362 INDEX
Engine Fails to Start ....................193
Starting and Operating .................... 192
Starting Procedures ......................192
Steering
Power ...........................205,206
Tilt Column ..........................110
Wheel Lock ...........................14
Storage ............................126,311
Stuck, Freeing .......................... 272
Sun Roof .............................. 121
Sun Visor Extension ....................... 84
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........ 46
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................... 284
Tachometer ............................144
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......143,261
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............68
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................18
Theft System (Security Alarm) ............... 18
Tilt Steering Column .....................110
Tire and Loading Information Placard ......... 219
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............. 217
Tire Markings ..........................214
Tire Safety Information .................... 214
Tires ............................ 77,223,346
Aging (Life of Tires) ....................229
Air Pressure .......................... 223
Chains ..............................231
Changing ............................262
Compact Spare ........................226
General Information ....................223
High Speed ..........................226
Inflation Pressures .....................224
Jacking .............................262
Life of Tires ..........................229
Load Capacity ..................... 219,220
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........... 232
Pressure Warning Light .................. 144
10
INDEX 363
Quality Grading .......................346
Radial ..............................226
Replacement .........................229
Rotation ............................231
Safety ...........................214,223
Sizes ...............................215
Snow Tires ........................... 231
Spare Tire ........................... 263
Spinning ............................227
Tread Wear Indicators ...................228
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .............. 250
Towing ...............................246
Disabled Vehicle .......................273
Guide ..............................250
Recreational ..........................258
Weight ..............................250
Traction .............................. 202
Traction Control ......................... 212
Traction Control Switch ...................212
Trailer Towing .......................... 246
Cooling System Tips ....................258
Hitches .............................248
Minimum Requirements ................. 251
Trailer and Tongue Weight ...............250
Wiring .............................. 255
Trailer Towing Guide .....................250
Trailer Weight .......................... 250
Transaxle ............................. 194
Additives ............................301
Automatic ....................12,192,194,299
Autostick ............................200
Filter ...............................301
Maintenance .........................299
Operation ...........................194
Overdrive ...........................199
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威)..115
364 INDEX
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 23
Transporting Pets ........................72
Tread Wear Indicators ....................228
Trip Computer .......................... 155
Trip Odometer .......................... 146
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................ 149
Tumbling Rear Seat (Sedan) .................93
Turn Signals .........................104,149
Understanding Your Instrument Panel .........140
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 346
Universal Transmitter .....................115
Unleaded Gasoline ....................... 237
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .............. 42
Vanity Mirrors ........................... 84
Variance, Compass ....................... 156
Vehicle Certification Label ................. 244
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ................... 220,244,245
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 7
Vehicle Storage ......................... 311
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .......... 18
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............143
Warnings and Cautions ..................... 6
Warranty Information ..................... 344
Washers, Windshield ..................106,109
Washing Vehicle ......................... 303
Water
Driving Through ......................203
Wheel and Wheel Trim .................... 304
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................304
Wind Buffeting .......................33,123
Window Fogging ........................186
Windows .............................. 31
10
INDEX 365
Windshield Defroster ......................75
Windshield Washers ................ 106,109,289
Fluid ...............................289
Windshield Wipers ....................106,289
Wiper, Delay ...........................108
Wiper, Rear ............................134
Wipers, Intermittent ......................108
366 INDEX
Chrysler Group LLC
10PT44-126-AC 3rd Edition Printed in U.S.A.

Navigation menu